دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsFlat Panel TVME65B

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ME65B

ME75B

BN46-00098N-03

ﺮﻴﻴﻐﺘﻠﻟ ﺕﺎﻔﺻﺍﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻀﺨﺗﻭ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﻼﺘﺧﺎﺑ ﺮﻬﻈﻤﻟﺍﻭ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺍ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻳ ﺪﻗ

.ءﺍﺩﻷﺍ ﻦﻴﺴﺤﺗ ﺽﺮﻐﺑ ﻖﺒﺴﻣ ﺭﺎﻌﺷﺇ ﻥﻭﺩ

Summary of content (213 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ME65B‬‬ ‫‪ME75B‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ME65B‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫
PAGE 3
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪ 55‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 56‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 60‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 61‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬ ‫‪61‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪component‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI-DVI‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪ 64‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo
PAGE 4
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪Menus‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪97‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪99‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 104‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 106‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 106‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ PC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭ ‪DP‬‬ ‫‪ 106‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ AV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Component‬ﺃﻭ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ 107‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)‪(G/R‬‬ ‫‪ 107‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 108‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 109‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ 109‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷ
PAGE 5
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 10p 116‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 116‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ "ﺃﺳﻮﺩ"‬ ‫‪ 116‬ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 116‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 116‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 117‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 117‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 117‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 118‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ 118‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪MPEG‬‬ ‫‪ 118‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟـ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ 118‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪Auto Motion Plus 118‬‬ ‫‪ 119‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 120‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 120‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 121‬ﺻﻮﺕ
PAGE 6
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 131‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 132‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 134‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪ 134‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪ 134‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 135‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 135‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 136‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 136‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 137‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ 139‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 140‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪WPS(PBC) 142‬‬ ‫‪One Foot Connection 143‬‬ ‫‪ 144‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ 145‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 145‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ 146‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻇﻨﻼ‬ ‫‪ 148‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟ
PAGE 7
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 152‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪) Eco‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 153‬ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪)Auto Power Off 153‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 153‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 153‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ (‬ ‫‪ 153‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 154‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫‪PIP 154‬‬ ‫‪ 155‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 155‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ 155‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 156‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ 156‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 156‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 157‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 157‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 157‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ 157‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 158‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 15
PAGE 8
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 163‬‬ ‫‪Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) 163‬‬ ‫‪ 164‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 164‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪DivX® Video On Demand 166‬‬ ‫‪ 166‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ 166‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 166‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ 167‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ 167‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ 167‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ 168‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪MAGICINFO LITE‬‬ ‫‪ 169‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪MagicInfo Lite Player‬‬ ‫‪ 169‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 172‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 172‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪ 173‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪ 173‬ﻣﺼﺎ
PAGE 9
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 188‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ AutoPlay‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪USB AutoPlay 188‬‬ ‫‪ 188‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ AutoPlay‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ 189‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 189‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 190‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 191‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪ 191‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪ 191‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ 191‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫© ‪Samsung Electronics 2012‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻭ‪ SyncMaster‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬ ‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍءﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪ .Samsung‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻨﻖ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺘﺰ )ﺭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮّﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫‪GAS‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫_‪-‬‬‫!‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺘﺮ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻣًﺎ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺄﺫﻧﻴﻚ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪1.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺄﺩﺍ ٍﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺃﺯﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻭﻓﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1.2‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪1.2.1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣُﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ /‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻻﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ME75B‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ )"ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ (" 1.2.1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪Return‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.2.2‬‬ ‫ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ME65B‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ME65B‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪1.2.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ME65B‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫* ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ‪ :‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪1‬‬
PAGE 30
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.2.4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Input‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Picture‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Sound‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Setup‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Multi Control‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ME75B‬‬ ‫‪7m ~ 10m‬‬ ‫˚‪30‬‬ ‫˚‪30‬‬ ‫‪7m ~ 10m‬‬ ‫˚‪30‬‬ ‫˚‪30‬‬ ‫‪ME65B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ˚30‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1.2.5‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪IR/‬‬ ‫‪AMBIENT‬‬ ‫‪SENSOR IN‬‬ ‫‪IR/‬‬ ‫‪AMBIENT‬‬ ‫‪SENSOR IN‬‬ ‫‪IR OUT‬‬ ‫‪IR OUT‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪. 2‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ(‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪1.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫˚ ‪15‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ˚15‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ )ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1.3.2‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 1.
PAGE 35
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 1.3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 1.
PAGE 36
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ]ﻣﻢ[‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ME65B‬‬ ‫‪1480.5‬‬ ‫‪1428.48‬‬ ‫‪803.52‬‬ ‫‪855.5‬‬ ‫‪32.2‬‬ ‫‪ME75B‬‬ ‫‪1678.2‬‬ ‫‪1653.2‬‬ ‫‪931.3‬‬ ‫‪958.7‬‬ ‫‪49.9‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪1.4.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.4.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ )ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.4.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ )‪(VESA‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺄﺳﻄﺢ ﺃﺳﻤﻨﺘﻴﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪1.5.
PAGE 40
‫‪1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪RS232C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪ D-Sub :‬ﺫﻭ ‪ 9‬ﺳﻨﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪-P2-‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫)‪(3.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ RJ45 :‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ (HUB ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬PC) ‫ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬LAN ‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬ 1 • HUB P2 RJ45 MDC P1 P1 P2 ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ P1 +TX 1 -TX RJ45 MDC P2 ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ <--------> 1 +TX 2 <--------> 2 -TX +RX 3 <--------> 3 +RX -RX 6 <--------> 6 -RX (HUB ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬PC) ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬LAN ‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬ P1 RJ45 MDC ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ P1 +TX 1 -TX P2 P2 ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ <--------> 3 +RX 2 <--------> 6 -RX +RX 3 <--------> 1 +TX -RX 6 <--------> 2 -TX 1 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ 41
PAGE 42
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.5.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ 3 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ RJ45 RS232C OUT RS232C IN RS232C OUT IN 1 • RS232C OUT IN OUT 1 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ 43
PAGE 44
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪1.5.
PAGE 45
‫‪1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ﻛـ "‪ "0xFE‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻞ‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪Command‬‬ ‫‪0xAA‬‬ ‫‪0xFF‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫'‪'A‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬ ‫‪r-CMD‬‬ ‫‪0x14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫"‪Input‬‬ ‫‪"Source‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫"‪ :"Input Source‬ﻛﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪Command‬‬ ‫‪0xAA‬‬ ‫‪0xFF‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬ ‫"‪ : "ERR‬ﻛﻮﺩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪r-CMD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫
PAGE 49
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Video Wall‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﺍ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ"‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ" ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Video Wall‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ‪ BNC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪ "Video Wall‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬ ‫ُﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Video Wall‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪Safety Lock‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD/Blu-ray Disc‬‬ ‫‪Audio‬‬ ‫‪2.1.1‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ .
PAGE 56
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ُ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI-DVI‬‬ ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬ ‫‪RGB / DVI /‬‬ ‫‪HDMI AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI-DVI‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Edit Name‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVI PC‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ← ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫**********‬ ‫**** ****‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ← ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ← ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ← ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪DVI OUT‬‬ ‫)‪(LOOPOUT‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Loopout‬ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DVI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DVI IN‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ُ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.4.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬ ‫‪AV IN‬‬ ‫‪AV OUT‬‬ ‫‪2.4.
PAGE 62
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.4.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI-DVI‬‬ ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬ ‫‪RGB / DVI /‬‬ ‫‪HDMI AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .HDMI-DVI‬ﻭﻟﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI-DVI‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ Edit Name‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVI Device‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.4.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) DVI‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪(1080p‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫‪2.5.1‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،MagicInfo‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،MagicInfo‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ MagicinfoSetupWizard‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،MagicInfo‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ .MagicInfo ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء‬ 2 3 MagicInfo Setup Wizard - v.1.12 Select Application - step 1 MagicInfo Pro (LAN, WAN based version) MagicInfo-i Premium (Web-based version) Select Later < Back(B) Next(N) > Finish Cancel .IP ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ 4 MagicInfo Setup Wizard - v.1.12 Select TCP/IP - step 2 Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: 192 . 168 . 0 . 102 Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 .
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ (.‫ )ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬.‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ 2 5 MagicInfo Setup Wizard - v.1.12 Select Language -step 3 Select the language you want to install on the system for menus and dialogs. Current Language : Engilsh Chinese [Traditional] German English French Italian Japanese Korean Russian Swedish Turkish Chinese [Simplified] Portuguese < Back(B) Next(N) > Finish Cancel .‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ 6 MagicInfo Setup Wizard - v.1.
PAGE 67
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Setup Wizard - v.1.12‬‬ ‫‪Setup Information‬‬ ‫\‪MagicInfo Pro [LAN,WAN based version‬‬ ‫‪1. Application :‬‬ ‫]‪2. Internet Protocol [TCP/IP‬‬ ‫‪192.168.0.102‬‬ ‫‪English‬‬ ‫‪Landscape‬‬ ‫‪IP :‬‬ ‫‪3. Language :‬‬ ‫‪4. Screen Type :‬‬ ‫‪Do not show again‬‬ ‫‪Cancel‬‬ ‫‪Finish‬‬ ‫‪Apply‬‬ ‫)‪< Back(B‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ MagicInfo‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪2.6.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ←ﻣﺼﺪﺭ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ "ﻣﺼﺪﺭ" ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ "ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮّﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 93‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ (MDC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Multi Control‬‬ ‫‪MENU m →System→Multi Control→ ENTER O‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻓﺎ ﻓﺮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﻣ ًّ‬ ‫‪3.1.1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Multi Control‬‬ ‫‪MDC Connection‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ‪ MDC‬ﻣﻨﻪ‪..‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪RS232C MDC‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ MDC‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.MDC Unified‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ MDC Unified‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪ MDC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪."OK‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،Welcome to the Install Shield Wizard for MDC_Unified‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑـ ‪MDC‬؟‬ ‫‪3.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ MDC‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪) RS-232C‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ‪ RS-232C‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ MDC‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Ethernet‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ‪.RJ45‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪RJ45‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪RS232C OUT‬‬ ‫‪RJ45‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [RS232C IN / OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.3.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - Connection list‬ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )‪ IP/COM‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ (Connection Type‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ‪ Set ID Range‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺩﻳﺰﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ LFD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ"‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮﺍ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.3.3‬‬ ‫‪Auto Set ID‬‬ ‫"ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ" ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ LFD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺩﻳﺰﻯ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Auto Set ID‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺩﻳﺰﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،99‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ 100‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ LFD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.3.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ LFD‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ LFD‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎﺧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.3.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ MDC‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪،LFD‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ .MDC‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ ،10‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪ 3.3.6‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪MDC Unified‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Add‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪Programs‬‬ ‫‪.Start‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،RS232C‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Serial‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Ethernet‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪ 3.3.7‬ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪Menus‬‬ ‫‪3.3.8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Home‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Home‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪Alert‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Fault Device‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Repair‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Fault Device List‬‬ ‫‪Fault Device Alert‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.3.9‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Picture‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ Color‬ﻭ ‪ Tint‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.PC‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ Red، Green‬ﻭ ‪ Blue‬ﻭ ‪ PC Screen Adjustment‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪Green‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Blue‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Dynamic Contrast‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Gamma Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Auto Motion Plus‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Off‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Auto Motion Plus‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Clear‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ Auto Motion Plus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Standard‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ Auto Motion Plus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪Picture Size‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤُﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Detail‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Picture Size‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ +/-‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.Zoom‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Detail‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PC Screen Adjustment‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ +/-‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Coarse‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Fine‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.3.10‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Sound‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ Bass‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Treble‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Bass‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Treble‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(Balance (L/R‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ SRS TS XT‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.6.11‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.System‬‬ ‫‪Video Wall‬‬ ‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Video Wall‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Video Wall‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪Video Wall‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Video Wall‬‬ ‫‪Format‬‬ ‫ُﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ 15‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ 6‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ 15‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ 15‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ 6‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ 15‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Screen Position‬‬ ‫ُﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ PIP‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ PIP‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Video Wall‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ON‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ Picture Size‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PIP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ON‬‬ ‫‪PIP Size‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ PIP Size‬ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PIP Source‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.PIP‬‬ ‫‪Sound Select‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Channel‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP Source‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪User Auto Color‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ PC‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Standby Control‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Fan Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Fan Speed‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪Safety Lock‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Safety Lock‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Off‬‬ ‫‪Button Lock‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Button Lock‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Off‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Source OSD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪.Source‬‬ ‫‪Not Optimum Mode OSD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪Clock Set‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : On Time‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Off Time‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Volume‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪..On Time‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪..On Time‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Holiday‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Holiday Management‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪..Timer‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Repeat‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Timer‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪ : Once‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ : Add‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Add‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.Holiday Management‬‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Delete: Delete holidays‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻕ‬ ‫‪Pixel Shift‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Screen Saver‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪.Screen Saver‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Time‬ﻟﻜﻞ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪Safety Screen‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Safety Screen‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Lamp Control‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Lamp Control‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،Manual Lamp Control‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ‪ Auto Lamp Control‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Off‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪3.3.12‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪Panel Control‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫‪Reset Picture‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Reset Sound‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Reset System‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Reset All‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪Edit Column‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Information‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.3.13‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 100
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Group>Edit‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Edit Group‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Add on the sub level‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Add on the same level‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Add on the sub level‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Add on the same level‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Edit‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Edit Group‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Delete‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪101‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Edit‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Edit Group‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ All Schedule List‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Add‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Add‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Add‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ ،Device Group‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Date&Time/Action‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ .OK‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Device Group‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Date&Time‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪ :Instant Execution‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ Timer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Action‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 104
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫‪3.6.14‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) RS232C‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ID‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣ ّ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ ID‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0‬ﻭ‪) .99‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 105
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪105‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ 1 ID‬ﻭ‪ :(3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪. 3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ All+Select‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 106
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭ‪ ،Color Tone‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.(.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Picture‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ←ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪95‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪(G/R‬‬ ‫‪R 50‬‬ ‫‪G 50‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪(G/R‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲ ﻭ▼‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫[‪ .
PAGE 108
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.3.1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ 16:9‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :16:9‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.16:9‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ : 1‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ : 2‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ)ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ(‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 109
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.3.2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ▼‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫[‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.3.4‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ PC‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪Off / 1024 x 768 / 1280 x 768 / 1360 x 768 / 1366 x 768 :‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪3D‬‬ ‫‪3D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Off‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2D → 3D‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻄﺮﻧﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )‪ 16:9‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪1280 x 720p‬‬ ‫‪ 50 / 25‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪1920 x 1080i‬‬ ‫‪ 50 / 25‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪1920 x 1080p‬‬ ‫‪ 50 / 25‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪HDMI PC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI PC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.1080 × 1920‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ 1080 × 1920‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 113
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 2D‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.3D‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺿﻤﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 114
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،PC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ"‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‪ ،2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 116
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 10p 4.6.9‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑـ ‪ ١٠‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 10p‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 117
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4.7.3‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4.7.4‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪MPEG‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪ MPEG‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ّ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 4.7.
PAGE 119
‫‪4‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Auto Motion Plus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Auto Motion Plus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Auto Motion Plus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PIP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪4.
PAGE 120
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ← ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 121
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ "ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ" ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪ :L/R‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 122
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪]ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ [ ]ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 123
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫← ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ← ‪ENTER ← MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MagicInfo Lite‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪MagicInfo Lite Player‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ MagicInfo Lite Player‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،USB‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ MagicInfo Lite‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 124
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ← ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6.2.1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄‪ ▼/▲/►/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]∂[ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 125
6 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬ (‫ﺙ‬/‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ (‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ 8 30 ~ 6 1080x1920 DivX 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 25 30 ~ 6 1080x1920 H.264 BP / MP / HP 8 30 ~ 6 1080x1920 MPEG4 SP / ASP 8 30 ~ 6 1080x1920 Motion JPEG 8 30 ~ 6 1080x1920 DivX 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 25 30 ~ 6 1080x1920 H.
PAGE 126
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫*‪ts.‬‬ ‫*‪tp.‬‬ ‫*‪trp.‬‬ ‫‪MPEG2‬‬ ‫‪TS‬‬ ‫‪1080x1920‬‬ ‫‪/ 25 / 24‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪H.264‬‬ ‫‪1080x1920‬‬ ‫‪30 ~ 6‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪VC1‬‬ ‫‪1080x1920‬‬ ‫‪30 ~ 6‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪AC3 /‬‬ ‫‪AAC /‬‬ ‫‪MP3 /‬‬ ‫‪DD+ /‬‬ ‫‪HE-AAC‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 127
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪127‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]∂[ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،TOOLS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 128
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ← ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪6.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄‪ ▼/▲/►/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.
PAGE 129
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ← ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6.4.1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄‪ ▼/▲/►/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫•‬ ‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]∂[ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﺃﻭ ▲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ,‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 131
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6.5.1‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻓﺮﺯ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ◄‪ .▼/▲/►/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ‬ ‫‪131‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ 6.5.2‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪132‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ∂‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ∑ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 134
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ← ﻣﺼﺪﺭ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ "ﻣﺼﺪﺭ" ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6.6.1‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ "ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮّﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 135
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ 6.6.3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫← ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ← ﻣﺼﺪﺭ← ‪ ← TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6.6.4‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫← ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ← ﻣﺼﺪﺭ← ‪ ← TOOLS‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.
PAGE 136
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪7.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.LAN‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫)‪(ADSL / VDSL‬‬ ‫‪RJ45‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ "ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ "IP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 137
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 7.1.2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ← ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ)ﻋﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .LAN‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫)‪WPS(PBC‬‬ ‫‪One Foot Connection‬‬ ‫‪ Network Setup‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ Network Setup‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Network Setup‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ "ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ"‪.
PAGE 139
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 7.1.3‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻭﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪Samsung (WIS10ABGN,‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ّ‬ ‫‪ ،(WIS12ABGNX‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 140
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫)‪WPS(PBC‬‬ ‫‪One Foot Connection‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ Samsung‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7.1.4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻔﺮ ﻳُﺴﻤﻰ "ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ" ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ .
PAGE 141
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ "ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ "ﺩﻋﻢ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ"‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 142
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟـ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺒّﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩ ‪.DNS‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪."..‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫‪WPS(PBC) 7.1.
PAGE 143
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪One Foot Connection 7.1.6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ One Foot Connection‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Samsung‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،One Foot Connection‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ One Foot Connection‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪.www.samsung.com‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪One Foot Connection‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 144
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 7.1.7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ّ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ)ﻋﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ؟"‪.‬‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 145
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ← ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7.2.1‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 146
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﺡ‪ .
PAGE 147
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪ :PPT‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 148
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ←ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻓﺎ ﻓﺮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﻣ ًّ‬ ‫‪8.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪MDC‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ MDC‬ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪.MDC‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪RS232C MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ MDC‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪.RS232C‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪RS232C MDC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ MDC‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.RJ45‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ID Setup‬‬ ‫ُﻌﺮﻓﺎ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(99~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﻣ ًّ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫•‬ ‫[‪.
PAGE 149
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Timer‬‬ ‫‪ 8.2.1‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪ .
PAGE 150
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8.2.2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻭﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ~ﺟﻤﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ~ﺳﺒﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺒﺖ~ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 151
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8.2.5‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﺈﺟﺎﺯﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺓ‬ ‫‪ : Add‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﺈﺟﺎﺯﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲ ‪ ،▼ /‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺪء‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺎﺯﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ؟"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 152
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ‪Eco‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﺣﻞ ←‪ENTER← Eco‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ‪Eco‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪Eco‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪Auto Power Off‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8.4.1‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ"‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ /‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ 8.4.
PAGE 153
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8.4.3‬ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 15 /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ 30 / .‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ 60 /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪)Auto Power Off 8.4.4‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.
PAGE 154
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8.5.3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ"‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.6‬‬ ‫‪PIP‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←‪ENTER← PIP‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ)‪ Double (à,Œ‬ﻓﻲ ‪) PIP‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 155
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻬﻮﻩ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻇﻼﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‪ 4/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ 8/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ 10/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪8.
PAGE 156
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8.8.2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪ /‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﱠﺪﺩﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.
PAGE 157
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮّﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ "MDC‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪ .MagicInfo‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8.9.4‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ 15‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻣُﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 159
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8.10‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺤﺚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 160
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﻋﺎﻡ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲء‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪BD Wise‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲء‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲء‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8.11.1‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8.11.
PAGE 161
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪BD Wise 8.11.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ .BD Wise‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ BD Wise‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ 8.11.4‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8.11.
PAGE 162
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8.11.9‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 77‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 75‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 80‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ً‬ ‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .
PAGE 163
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 8.12‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←)‪ENTER← Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬ ‫‪Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) 8.12.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑـ ‪?Anynet+‬‬ ‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ .Anynet+‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Samsung‬ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 164
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﻢ_ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ( ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ 8.12.2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 165
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Anynet+‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Anynet+‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪DivX® Video On Demand 8.13‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ‪ENTER← DivX® Video On Demand‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.VOD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،DivX VOD‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ "‪."http://vod.divx.com‬‬ ‫‪ 8.14‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ← ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ Samsung‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ← ‪ENTER‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ" ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 168
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪m MENU O‬‬ ‫←ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ←ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ←‪ENTER← Samsung‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪ 10.1‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪MagicInfo Lite Player‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪[MagicInfo Lite Player‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪) .FAT32‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪(.NTFS‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 170
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪AC3 / AAC /MP3‬‬ ‫‪/ DD+ / HE-AAC‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪24 / 25 / 30‬‬ ‫‪1080x1920‬‬ ‫‪MPEG2‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪6 ~ 30‬‬ ‫‪1080x1920‬‬ ‫‪H.264‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪6 ~ 30‬‬ ‫‪1080x1920‬‬ ‫‪VC1‬‬ ‫‪*.ts‬‬ ‫‪*.tp‬‬ ‫‪TS‬‬ ‫‪*.trp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪Flash‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪Flash 10.1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ‪Flash‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪SWF :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪720 × 1280 :‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Flash‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‬‫‬‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪Flash‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪FLV :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪H.264 BP :‬‬ ‫‬‫‬‫▫‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪1080 × 1920 :‬‬ ‫‪Audio‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪H.
PAGE 172
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪ 10.2‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪10.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،MagicInfo Lite‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ) ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Network Settings‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪<-‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪<- MagicInfo Lite‬ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ‪http://192.168.0.10:7001/MagicInfo/) :‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪192.168.0.
PAGE 173
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10.2.2‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪ <-MENU m -> MagicInfo Lite‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ENTER <-‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ MagicInfo Lite‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ )ﻣﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 174
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Device‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Lite Device‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ View Unapproved Lite Device‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑـ ‪.Lite Device‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Approve‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Lite‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 175
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Device Name‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Device Model Name‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Device Group‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Location‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View All Lite Device‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 176
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10.2.4‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Device -> Time‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Clock Set‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،(.‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ >ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.
PAGE 177
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪ 10.3‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ‪ <-‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 10.4‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 178
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪am ~ --:-- pm --:-‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪Folder1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ‬ ‫‪Menu1.jpg‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪Menu2.
PAGE 179
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪am ~ 02:00 pm 12:00‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪20110101_1200.
PAGE 180
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10.4.2‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 181
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪am ~ 02:00 pm 12:00‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪am ~ --:-- pm --:--‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10.4.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 182
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪20110101_1200.Isch‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.
PAGE 183
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10.4.4‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 184
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10.4.5‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 185
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10.4.6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪20110101_1200.
PAGE 186
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪ 10.5‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪10.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Contents Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 187
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10.5.2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Contents Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB Memory‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪Folder1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪Menu1.
PAGE 188
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫‪ AutoPlay 10.6‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪10.6.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ AutoPlay‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ AutoPlay‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.MagicInfo‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪USB AutoPlay 10.7‬‬ ‫‪10.7.
PAGE 189
‫‪10‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ USB AutoPlay‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫⻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ 10.8‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪10.8.1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪MagicInfo Lite‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪: A-VNUSCDSP-100‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪: Monitor‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪: FE-FF-FF-FF-FF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫‪10.8.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 191
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫‪11.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء‬ ‫‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 192
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(PC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫)"‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ"(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI-DVI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 193
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ LED‬ﻛﻞ ‪0.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)"‪ 2.
PAGE 194
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪11.2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫‪194‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪ :"Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( →‬ ‫‪) Appearance and Themes‬ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ( → ‪Display‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( → ‪) Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( → ‪) Advanced‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ( → ‪) Monitor‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪Monitor Settings‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.
PAGE 195
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪ :"Windows XP‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ →‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ → ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ → ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪BIOS‬‬ ‫‪) SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫"‪ :"Windows ME/2000‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫→ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ → ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪) BIOS SETUP‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 196
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 12.1‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ME65B‬‬ ‫‪ME75B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 65‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 163‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 75‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 190.5‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪) 1428.48‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪) 803.52‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪) 1650.24‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪) 928.26‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 32.2 × 855.5 × 1480.5‬ﻣﻢ ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ 25.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 49.9 × 958.7 × 1678.2‬ﻣﻢ ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ 44.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ( ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪VESA‬‬ ‫‪ 400x 400‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪1.
PAGE 197
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 12.2‬ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ LED‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 198
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 12.3‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) CDT‬ﻣﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ 85‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ CDT‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.
PAGE 199
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺮﺗﺰ‪.
PAGE 200
12 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ‬12.4 TheaterSound HD, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TheaterSound HD technology is incorporated under license form SRS Lab, Inc. ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬D ‫ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ‬Dolby ‫ ﺗُﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬.Dolby Laboratories ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ .Dolby Laboratories ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
PAGE 201
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ .SAMSUNG ‫ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء‬،Samsung ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ North America http://www.samsung.com 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) U.S.A http://www.samsung.com/ca (English) 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) CANADA 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) MEXICO http://www.samsung.com/ca_fr (French) http://www.samsung.com Latin America http://www.samsung.com 0800-333-3733 ARGENTINA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 202
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ Latin America http://www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) 1-800-299-0013 GUATEMALA 800-27919267 HONDURAS http://www.samsung.com 1-800-234-7267 JAMAICA http://www.samsung.com/latin (Spanish) 00-1800-5077267 NICARAGUA 800-7267 PANAMA http://www.samsung.com 0-800-777-08 PERU http://www.samsung.com 1-800-682-3180 PUERTO RICO http://www.samsung.com 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) TRINIDAD & TOBAGO http://www.samsung.com 0-800-100-5303 VENEZUELA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 203
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ Europe http://www.samsung.com 0810 - SAMSUNG AUSTRIA (7267864, € 0.07/min) http://www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) 02-201-24-18 BELGIUM http://www.samsung.com 05 133 1999 BOSNIA http://www.samsung.com 07001 33 11, normal tariff BULGARIA http://www.samsung.com 062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864) CROATIA http://www.samsung.com 8009 4000 only from landline (+30) 210 6897691 from mobile and land line CYPRUS http://www.samsung.com 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) CZECH http://www.samsung.
PAGE 204
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ Europe http://www.samsung.com 0 801-1SAMSUNG (172-678) +48 22 607-93-33 POLAND http://www.samsung.com 808 20 - SAMSUNG (808 20 7267) PORTUGAL http://www.samsung.com 08008 SAMSUNG (08008 726 7864) RUMANIA TOLL FREE No. http://www.samsung.com 0700 Samsung (0700 726 7864) SERBIA http://www.samsung.com 0800 - SAMSUNG (0800-726 786) SLOVAKIA http://www.samsung.com 902 - 1 - SAMSUNG (902 172 678) SPAIN http://www.samsung.com 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) SWEDEN http://www.samsung.
PAGE 205
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ http://www.samsung.com/hk (Chinese) (852) 3698 - 4698 HONG KONG 1800 1100 11 INDIA http://www.samsung.com/ hk_en (English) http://www.samsung.com 3030 8282 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 http://www.samsung.com 0800-112-8888 INDONESIA 021-5699-7777 http://www.samsung.com 0120-327-527 JAPAN http://www.samsung.com 1800-88-9999 MALAYSIA http://www.samsung.com 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) NEW ZEALAND http://www.samsung.
PAGE 206
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ Middle East http://www.samsung.com/ae (English) 183-2255 KUWAIT http://www.samsung.com 080 100 2255 MOROCCO http://www.samsung.com/ae (English) 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) OMAN 9200-21230 SAUDI ARABIA http://www.samsung.com 444 77 11 TURKEY http://www.samsung.com 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) U.A.E http://www.samsung.com/ae_ar (Arabic) http://www.samsung.com/ae_ar (Arabic) http://www.samsung.com/ae (English) http://www.samsung.com/ae_ar (Arabic) Africa http://www.samsung.
PAGE 207
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ TFT-LCD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؟‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻄﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ُﺳ ً‬ ‫ﻤﻜﺎ‪ .
PAGE 210
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( < ‪) Power Supply‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 211
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Horizontal bar with Black color‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪TIME‬‬ ‫‪FLIGHT‬‬ ‫‪20:30‬‬ ‫‪OZ348‬‬ ‫‪21:10‬‬ ‫‪UA102‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 212
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Gamma‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Gamma‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮّﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 1080 × 1920‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1920‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭ ‪ 1080‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ )‪(DVD‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺪ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.